<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en-GB">
	<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=202.74.0.0%2F16</id>
	<title>Tatters of the King - User contributions [en-gb]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=202.74.0.0%2F16"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Contributions/202.74.0.0/16"/>
	<updated>2026-10-24T22:48:58Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.46.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Nathaniel_Browne&amp;diff=3396</id>
		<title>Nathaniel Browne</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Nathaniel_Browne&amp;diff=3396"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T10:06:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.215.53: /* Goals */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:nathaniel.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel Browne is a man looking for inspiration. Nathaniel describes himself as an author, finding titles such as writer or novellist limiting to his creative focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Family==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel is an only child, his parents are both deceased. His father, a Navy captain was killed when a German shell struck the bridge of his ship during the battle of Jutland, and his mother died (mainly of grief) soon thereafter. Nathaniel, his creative urge always at odds with his strict upbringing, misses them less than might be imagined.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel has a cousin, Joseph Browne, who is a Catholic priest living in Norwich, and two nieces – one a spinster living in London, the other having moved to Australia with her husband.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel_Browne.png|200px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Goals==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel wants to write stories that inspire great emotion in their readers. He has become very interested in the story of [[Carcosa]] and [[The King in Yellow]] after seeing the play [[Carcosa, or The Queen and the Stranger]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having read [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sir_Gawain_and_the_Green_Knight Sir Gawain and the Green Knight], and interested in the idea of translation and adaptation of older works, Nathaniel keeps pestering [[Andrew Saunders]] to introduce him to his friend, John.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel is now attempting to work on a sequel to his successful  &#039;[[The Tatters of the King]]&#039; anthology, but is increasingly finding himself rather bereft of inspiration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Friends==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alan Cooper, a Librarian at the British Library, is an old school chum of Nathaniel&#039;s&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jean-Paul Etienne, a gentleman of leisure (originally from Paris), is a friend who Nathaniel met by moving in writing circles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Andrew Saunders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Income==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel lives off an inheritance when not earning money from his stories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite having come into rather a lot more money thanks to his successful &#039;Tatters of the King&#039; anthology, Nathaniel has kept the same sort of life and habits, not abandoning his humble lodgings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Secrets==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne&#039;s Secrets]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spiritual Home==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:watlib.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watford Public Library&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.215.53</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Drakmar&amp;diff=3395</id>
		<title>Drakmar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Drakmar&amp;diff=3395"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T10:03:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.215.53: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Drakmar.jpg|400px|thumb|right|The Blood of the Ogress,Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drakmar is a location in the Himalayan kingdom of [[Mustang]] that the artist [[Thomas Villiers]] intended to include in his tryptich of the Trinity of [[Hastur]]. It was the final destination of [[Quarrie]]&#039;s pilgrimage, but its exact nature was unknown when the investigators left England.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only mention of Drakmar found in any books about the area so far read by the investigators refers to it as a place from which some emissaries came to the king&#039;s court in the 18th century. Once in Mustang it is discovered that an alternate spelling of Drakmar is &#039;&#039;Tramar&#039;&#039;, but by then it is too late to do any research under that name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirmation from people met along the route that Quarrie was indeed heading for Drakmar, the place was located near to the Nepalese village of Kag, just beyond the Monastery at [[Te]]. According to local legend, Drakmar was the place where the Guru Rimpoche slew the ogress Balmo and placed great &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; on her organs to prevent her from coming back to life. The red cliffs of Drakmar are said to be stained with Balmo&#039;s blood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The locals say that the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and Balmo is alive again, and that the ghosts that serve her have been taking people who venture too close.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At Drakmar are found dramatically coloured cliffs riddled with dozens of apparently man-made caves. Nobody seems to know who built these.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drakmar is in fact the home to a colony of [[Tcho-Tcho]] who guard a gate to [[Tsang]] and the god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] which can also be redirected to the Plateau of [[Leng]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.215.53</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Drakmar&amp;diff=3394</id>
		<title>Drakmar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Drakmar&amp;diff=3394"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T10:02:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.215.53: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Drakmar.jpg|400px|thumb|right|The Blood of the Ogress,Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drakmar is a location in the Himalayan kingdom of [[Mustang]] that the artist [[Thomas Villiers]] intended to include in his tryptich of the Trinity of [[Hastur]]. It was the final destination of [[Quarrie]]&#039;s pilgrimage, but its exact nature was unknown when the investigators left England.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The only mention of Drakmar found in any books about the area so far read by the investigators refers to it as a place from which some emissaries came to the king&#039;s court in the 18th century. Once in Mustang it is discovered that an alternate spelling of Drakmar is &#039;&#039;Tramar&#039;&#039;, but by then it is too late to do any research under that name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After confirmation from people met along the route that Quarrie was indeed heading for Drakmar, the place was located near to the Nepalese village of Kag, just beyond the Monastery at [[Te]]. According to local legend, Drakmar was the place where the Guru Rimpoche slew the ogress Balmo and placed great &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; on her organs to prevent her from coming back to life. The red cliffs of Drakmar are said to be stained with Balmo&#039;s blood.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The locals say that the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and Balmo is alive again, and that the ghosts that serve her have been taking people who venture too close.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At Drakmar are found dramatically coloured cliffs riddled with dozens of apparently man-made caves. Nobody seems to know who built these.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drakmar is in fact the home to a colony of [[Tcho-Tcho]] who guard a gate to [[Tsang]] and the god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] which can be redirected the Plateau of [[Leng]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.215.53</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3388</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3388"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T06:52:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.215.53: /* Friday February 17th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:anza.jpg|200px|thumb|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a drooling, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatrures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched sound overwhelms their senses. The time spend travelling through the gate seems simultaneously to be mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair. Saunders makes a mental note to tell his friend Professor Tolkien about this place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the use of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and without warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of this act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they understand why he has done it. Browne&#039;s mind almost immediately clears and he realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied. Soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, reflects from the polished stones. The piping has stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaza stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigators look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arrival, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, or what, he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The King in Yellow has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.215.53</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3387</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3387"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T06:30:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.220.62: /* The Plaza of the King */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a droolong, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatrures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched sound overwhelms their senses. The time spend travelling through the gate seems simultaneously to be mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair. Saunders makes a mental note to tell his friend Professor Tolkien about this place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the use of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and without warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of this act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they understand why he has done it. Browne&#039;s mind almost immediately clears and he realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied. Soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, reflects from the polished stones. The piping has stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaza stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigators look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arrival, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, or what, he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The King in Yellow has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.220.62</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3386</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3386"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T06:29:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.220.62: /* The Upper House */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a droolong, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatrures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched sound overwhelms their senses. The time spend travelling through the gate seems simultaneously to be mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair. Saunders makes a mental note to tell his friend Professor Tolkien about this place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the use of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and without warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of this act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they understand why he has done it. Browne&#039;s mind almost immediately clears and he realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied. Soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, reflects from the polished stones. The piping has stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaza stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigaotors look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arrival, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, or what, he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The King in Yellow has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.220.62</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3385</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3385"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T06:26:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.220.62: /* The Plaza of the King */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a droolong, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatrures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched sound overwhelms their senses. The time spend travelling through the gate seems simultaneously to be mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the use of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and without warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of this act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they understand why he has done it. Browne&#039;s mind almost immediately clears and he realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied. Soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, reflects from the polished stones. The piping has stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaza stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigaotors look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arrival, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, or what, he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The King in Yellow has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.220.62</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3384</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3384"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T06:24:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.220.62: /* The Upper House */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a droolong, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatrures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched sound overwhelms their senses. The time spend travelling through the gate seems simultaneously to be mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the use of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and without warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of this act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they understand why he has done it. Browne&#039;s mind almost immediately clears and he realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied. Soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, relflects from the polished stones. The pipes have stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaze stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigaotors look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arriavl, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, of what he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The King in Yellow has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.220.62</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3383</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3383"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T06:23:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.220.62: /* The Upper House */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a droolong, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatrures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched sound overwhelms their senses. The time spend travelling through the gate seems simultaneously to be mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the sue of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and withour warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of this act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they understand why he has done it. Browne&#039;s mind almost immediately clears and he realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied.  soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, relflects from the polished stones. The pipes have stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaze stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigaotors look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arriavl, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, of what he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The King in Yellow has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.220.62</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3277</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3277"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T20:06:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.212.155: /* Tuesday February 14th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039; carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his offer of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks out. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage, falling to the floor where [[Browne]] swings a foot at the man. The kick is ineffectual and the rioter sinks his teeth into Browne&#039;s ankle, driving him away and allowing the madman to leap to his feet and grab [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver finally puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Some say a man showed them &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Siva proves most capable and nothing more important than a case of spoons has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to negotiate around some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon until Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses. This intrigues [[Saunders]] who takes many photographs and notes, the villagers in these parts rocognise the investigators as westerners, but this deep into Nepal, none of them cares much.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]], suffering from acute acrophobia, proves quite incapable of crossing it until he requests and is given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This proves to be the hardest day&#039;s travel so far. [[Saunders]] is suffering and the terrain is treacherous. the investigators rope themselves together, which saves [[Umberto]]&#039;s life at one point. Meanwhile their guidem who is at least a decade older than any of them, bounds ahead like a mountain goat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually the Monastery at [[Te]] comes into view, a boulder-strewn plain between the ridge and the building itself. As the investigators crest the ridge they spot a figure moving in a doorway. Before they can react, a shot rings out and their guide, a hundred yards ahead, falls to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators dive behind boulders for cover as the gunman walks out of the monastery, carbine in hand, and moves forward quickly working the gun&#039;s action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He fires another shot in the direction of Withers, but distance and cover make the shot impossible. Meanwhile Withers is carefully aiming his rifle. the captain fires a single, perfect shot and hits the gunman in the skull. He falls dead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators hurry to the two fallen figures. The guide is alive, though badlt hurt, but Withers is able to stem the bleeding. The gunman proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]], bearded and suffering the after-effects of frostbite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The injured man is carried to the monastery, where the bodies of the three monks and their servant boy are found, shot dead an least a month ago by Schippone, and in an unpleasant state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The complex is large enough for the investigators to camp indoors without the smell of the corpses being a problem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the others check out the complex and look for something from which to make a stretcher, Withers alone outside with the injured guide, catches a glimpse of something moving amongst the rocks on a high ridge. he is glad to get into the defensible surroiundings of the monastery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now the problem of what to do with the injured man is raised. He can&#039;t be carried back to Tayen, and nor can he be abandoned here. Its just been decided that someone needs to go back for help when [[Siva]] stumbles out of the darkness. Wracked with guilt at abandoning his friends and employers, he followed them after all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators tell Siva he needs to stay here with the injured man and wait for them for at least 5 days. Siva is glad to be of service - this way he is helping them but does not need to go to [[Drakmar]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An uneasy night is spent at Te.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.212.155</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tatters_of_the_King&amp;diff=3268</id>
		<title>Tatters of the King</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tatters_of_the_King&amp;diff=3268"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:21:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Locations */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Tatters_Cover.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tatters of the King&#039;&#039;&#039;[http://catalog.chaosium.com/product_info.php?products_id=773&amp;amp;osCsid=07f84f248e3a49f3cf6199ee7fbb6629] is a Call of Cthulhu campaign written by Tim Wiseman and published by [http://chaosium.com Chaosium] and through which our role-playing [http://tentaclesandunderpants.info group] is currently being run. Play started on May 8th 2006. See [[current events]] for next session date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The game is being played in the suburb of Ellerslie, in [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Auckland Auckland, New Zealand].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The game is initially set in [http://www.yog-sothoth.com/docs/article-london-guide-1928.pdf London], [http://greywolfnz.homeip.net/wiki/attachments/1928.doc 1928]. It is the start of a bitterly cold winter, the worst in decades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
London is the capital of an empire covering a quarter of the globe and governing one quarter  of the human race. The people busy themselves with concerns of politics and government, finance and production, work and recreation. How fragile things are. What ignorance there is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are those whose engage in different pursuits - who would see an inhuman power come to Earth such that it would make mundane activity seem like a last twitch before dying.........&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keeper of Arcane Lore==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Game Master is [[Mark Chiddicks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Players==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The players are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nicola Bishop]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julia Blackmore]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Marcus Gustafsson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Darryn Mercer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Player Characters]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:crew2.jpg|right|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] - A failed writer, looking for his big story, played by Darryn Mercer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Andrew Saunders]] - British Museum curator and proud Scot, Played by Julia Blackmore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Captain George Withers]] - Coldstream Guards. Career soldier. Played by Nicola Bishop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;[[Umberto]]&#039; - Mysterious former Vatican investigator. Played by Marcus Gustafsson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Doctor Frederick Bartlett]] (deceased) - Eminent research psychologist, played by Marcus Gustafsson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notable Non-Player Characters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Prologue - Opening Night&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Talbot Estus]] (deceased) - American novelist, now debuting as a playwright&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;The Group&#039;&#039; - an amateur theatrical troupe:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Michael Gillen]] - Retired publisher, amateur actor and acquaintance of [[Doctor Frederick Bartlett]]. Estus&#039;s friend and companion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Hannah Keith]] - Amateur Actress and sister of [[Andrew Saunders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[George Keith]] - Amateur Actor and husband of [[Hannah Keith]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Walter Paige]] - Amateur Actor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Jean Hewart]] - Amateur Actress&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter One - The Madman&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr. Charles Highsmith]] - Asylum Superintendent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Alexander Roby]] - Incarcerated Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lucius Harriwell]] - Incarcerated Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Price and Evans]] - Asylum Nurses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Two - A Walk in the Park&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr. Lionel Trollope]] (deceased) - Roby family physician&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Grahame Roby]] - Financier, Alexander Roby&#039;s brother&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Detective Inspector Andrew Taylor]] - of New Scotland Yard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Delia Hartston]] - Alexander Roby&#039;s former fiancee, now [[Delia Morrison]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Peter Morrison]] - Abusive husband of Delia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Vincent Tuck]] - Private Detective, hired by Grahame Roby&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Michael [[Coombes]] (deceased?) - Sinister stalker, Bacon&#039;s ex-bodyguard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Three - Springer Mound &amp;amp; the Canal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Harold Jennings]] (deceased) - Unfriendly Suffolk farmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Montague Edwards]] (deceased) - Alexander Roby&#039;s secret guardian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lawrence Bacon]] (deceased) - Antiquarian, occultist and sorcerer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Four - The Flight North &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Cec Watts]] (deceased) - Tabloid Journalist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Henry Lister]] - Terrified cultist and necrophobe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Aleister Crowley]] - Famed Occultist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Five - To Walk Upon the Earth in Carcosa&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Quentin Spence]] - Poet and Failed Cultist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Noss]] of Yhtill - Leather worker from an alien world&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Yolanda]] - Noblewoman from [[Cassilda]]&#039;s court&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Six - Talk of Goatswood&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Wilfred Gresty]] (deceased) - Writer of letters and spy for the Goatswood cult&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Seven - Nug&#039;s Farm&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Hillary Quarrie]] - Estranged wife of Malcolm and priestess of the Goat&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Atkinson]] (deceased) - Ailing leader of the Goatswood Shub-Niggurath cult&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Eight - The Brothers of the Yellow Sign&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Paolo Tuminardo]] - Milanese Guide and young Fascist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Giuseppe Colombo]] - Ancient, curmudgeonly Italian Brother of the Yellow Sign&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Thomas Villiers]] (deceased) - Insane artist and Brother of the Yellow Sign&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Nine - The Viceroy of India&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] - Minor diplomat and lounge lizard, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Ian Gore]] - Missionary, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mrs [[Henrietta Tullis]] - Matronly figure, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Stephen Thomas]] - Quiet, bookish man, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Francesca Nicholson]] - Bright young thing, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Patricia Berry]] - Quiet, shy young lady, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Ten - A Thousand Miles&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sivakumar Patel]] - Guide and translator from Bombay&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Jigme Rinzing]] - Nepalese merchant/guide&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Eleven - To Drakmar&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Tsewan Pemba]] - Tibetan Guide &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Carlo Schippone]] (deceased) - Graduate student and Himalayan adventurer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Twelve - The Upper House&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - &#039;&#039;Alpini&#039;&#039; officer and Himalayan adventurer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Roberto Anzalone]] - Professor of Asian History and Brother of the Yellow Sign&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Malcolm Quarrie]] - Elusive scientist and occultist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Literary Works==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Carcosa, or The Queen and the Stranger]]  - a fantasy in two acts, [http://greywolfnz.homeip.net/wiki/attachments/CARCOSA.pdf script] by [[Talbot Estus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Le Roi en Jeune]] - a rare French play, playwright anonymous&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_King_in_Yellow The King in Yellow] - a collection of short [http://www.yankeeclassic.com/miskatonic/library/stacks/literature/chambers/stories/kinginye/contents.htm stories] by [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Robert_W._Chambers Robert W Chambers]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[An Inhabitant of Carcosa and Haita the Shepherd]] - by [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ambrose_Bierce Ambrose Bierce]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Der Wanderer durch den See]] - by [[Alexander Roby]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[British Gods]]: Religion and Myth in the Western Kingdoms of Anglo-Saxon Britain - by [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Turner Codex]]: A translation of Mesoamerican prayers and libations to Hastur - trans. M. Turner &#039;&#039;et al&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Tatters of the King]]: A book of short stories by [[Nathaniel Browne]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Revelations of Glaaki]]: The Goatswood cult&#039;s compilation of occult knowledge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.mdx.ac.uk/www/study/mapengwa.htm  Map of England and Wales, 1928]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.yog-sothoth.com/docs/article-london-guide-1928.pdf London], England - [http://www.londonancestor.com/maps/roads-central.htm Map of London, 1926]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Scala Theatre]], Charlotte St, London&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[St Agnes Asylum]], [[Weobley]], Herefordshire, England&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Clare Melford]], Suffolk, England&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Loch Mullardoch]], near Inverness, Scotland&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Carcosa]], a dream city made flesh&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Goatswood]], an area of the Severn Valley in Gloucestershire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nug&#039;s Farm]], Hillary Quarrie&#039;s home, in the Goatswood region&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Milan]], Lombardy, Italy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Viceroy of India]] - Modern P&amp;amp;O passenger liner, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[India]], the gateway to Nepal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bombay]], port of entry to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nepal]], mountain kingdom, closed to Westerners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Mustang]], a small kingdom in Northern Nepal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Drakmar]], in Mustang, the legendary site of the death of the ogress Balmo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;As referred to in the session reports below, there have been a number of [[murders]] related to the Roby case.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 1]] - Opening Night&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 1.5]] - The Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 2]] - The Plot Thickens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 3]] - Alexander&#039;s Friends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 4]] - Teeth of Winter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 5]] - Four Go Mad in London&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 6]] - Death by Night, Death by Day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 7]] - Missing Persons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 8]] - To Walk Upon the Earth in Carcosa&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 9]] - Aftermath - a Year in the Lives...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 10]] - Nug&#039;s Farm, or &amp;quot;Are You Local?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 11]] - Il Fratelli di Signo Giallo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 12]] - The Viceroy of India, or &amp;quot;May I Have This Dance?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 13]] - A Matter of Honour&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 14]] - The Pilgrimage of Grace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 15]] - Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Carlo_Schippone&amp;diff=3267</id>
		<title>Carlo Schippone</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Carlo_Schippone&amp;diff=3267"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:19:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Schippone2.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carlo was [[Roberto Anzalone]]&#039;s graduate student and travelled on the expedition with Anzalone, [[Malcolm Quarrie]] and Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), discovered in the Nepalese village of Kag, shows a great mental deterioration after reaching [[Drakmar]]. According to reports from [[Te]] he had returned alone from Drakmar, claiming his companions had been &#039;taken by ghosts&#039; and was being nursed to health by the monks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the investigators reached the Monastery at Te they came under fire from Schippone, who wounded their guide before [[Withers]] put a bullet through his brain from long range. It was discovered that Schippone had killed the monks and had been living alone in the Monastery for many weeks.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3266</id>
		<title>Jigme Rinzing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3266"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:19:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Jigme.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This quiet, polite Nepalese merchant guided the investigators&#039; Nepalese expedition as far as the town of Gora Padi. He spoke no English, so the investigators never really got to know him, but the impression they got was that he was a man of few words, and even had there been no language barrier they would have fared little better.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3265</id>
		<title>Jigme Rinzing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3265"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:19:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Jigme.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This quiet, polite Nepalese merchant guided the investigators&#039; Nepalese expedition as far as the town of Gora Padi. He spoke no English, so the investigators never really got to know him, but the impression they got was that he was a man of few words, and even had their been no language barrier they would have fared little better.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tsewan_Pemba&amp;diff=3264</id>
		<title>Tsewan Pemba</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tsewan_Pemba&amp;diff=3264"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:17:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Pemba.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This hardy, wiry young Nepalese Tibetan guided the investigators from Gora Padi to just beyond Kag, where the local tales of ghosts and the ogress Balmo was too much for his superstitious nature and he abandoned them, taking with him all six of their native bearers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3263</id>
		<title>Jigme Rinzing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3263"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:15:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Jigme.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This quiet, polite Nepalese merchant guided the investigators&#039; Nepalese expedition as far as the town of Gora Padi&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3262</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3262"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:12:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 2nd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3261</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3261"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:11:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 16th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3260</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3260"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:11:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 15th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3259</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3259"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:10:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday February 14th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3258</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3258"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:10:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 13th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3257</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3257"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:09:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 13th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3256</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3256"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:09:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 8th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3255</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3255"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:08:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 17th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3254</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3254"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:08:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 16th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3253</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3253"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:08:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 15th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3252</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3252"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:07:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday February 14th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3251</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3251"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:06:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 13th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3250</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3250"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:01:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Sunday February 12th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3249</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3249"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:55:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday February 11th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3248</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3248"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:55:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday February 11th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3247</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3247"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:54:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 6th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone&#039;s diary]] ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3246</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3246"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:53:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday February 11th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone&#039;s diary]] ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3245</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3245"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:45:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 10th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3244</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3244"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:45:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 10th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[TSewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3243</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3243"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:41:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 9th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3242</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3242"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:37:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday January 30th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3241</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3241"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:36:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 8th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3240</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3240"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:34:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday February 7th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3239</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3239"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:34:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 10th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3238</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3238"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:33:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday February 7th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3237</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3237"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:32:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 6th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3236</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3236"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:29:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Sunday February 5th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3235</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3235"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:27:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday February 4th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3234</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3234"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:24:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 3rd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3233</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3233"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:23:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 2nd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3232</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3232"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:23:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 2nd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, YAngser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3231</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3231"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:15:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 1st 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3230</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3230"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:13:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday January 31st 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3229</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3229"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:12:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday January 30th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>